blob: 58f1e8008eaf2d936326adfab24102be71b7bf4d [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000025#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000032#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000054#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000056#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
60#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000062#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000065#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000066#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000067#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000070#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000071#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000072#include <cassert>
73#include <climits>
74#include <cstddef>
75#include <cstdint>
76#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000077#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000078#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000079#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000080#include <utility>
81#include <vector>
82
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000083using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000084using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000085
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000086#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
87
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000088// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
89// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
90// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
91// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000092static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
93 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
94 cl::desc(
95 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
96
97static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
98 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
99 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000100
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000101static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000102 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000104
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000108
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000109static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
110 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
111 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
112 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
113 "predicated store"));
114
115static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
116 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
117 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
118 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
119
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000120static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
121 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
122 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
123 "executed"));
124
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000125static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
126 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
127 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
128 "speculatively executed instructions"));
129
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000130STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
133STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
134 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
135STATISTIC(
136 NumLookupTablesHoles,
137 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000138STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
140 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000141STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000142
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000143namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000144
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
146// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
147// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000148using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
149 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
152// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
153// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000154using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
157struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
158 ConstantInt *Value;
159 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000161 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000162 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
165 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
166 return Value < RHS.Value;
167 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000168
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000169 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
170};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000171
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000173 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000174 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000175 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
177
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000178 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000179 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
180 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000182 BasicBlock *Pred,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
185 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000186
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000187 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000188 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000189 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
190 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000191 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000193 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000194 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000195 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
196 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000197
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000198public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000199 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000200 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000201 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000202 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000203
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
205};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
207} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000208
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000209/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000211static bool
212SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000213 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000214 if (SI1 == SI2)
215 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000216
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000217 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
218 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
219 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
220 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
221 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000222
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
224 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000225 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
226 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
227 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
229 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
231 if (FailBlocks)
232 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
233 Fail = true;
234 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000236
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000237 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
241/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
242/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000243static bool
244isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
245 Instruction *Cond,
246 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
247 if (SI1 == SI2)
248 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
250
251 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000252 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
254 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
255 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
256 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000257 if (!Ci2)
258 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
260 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
261 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
262 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
263 return false;
264
265 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
266 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
269 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
272 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000273 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000274 return false;
275 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
276 }
277 return true;
278}
279
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000280/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
281/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
282/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
283/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000284static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
285 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000286 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
287 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000288}
289
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000290/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
291/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
292/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000293/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000294static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000295 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000296 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000297 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000298 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000299}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000300
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000301/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
302/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000303/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
304/// which works well enough for us.
305///
306/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000307/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
308/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
309/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
310/// set and true is returned.
311///
312/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
313/// Select whose cost is 2.
314///
315/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
316/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
317/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000318static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000320 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
322 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000323 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
324 // so limit the recursion depth.
325 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
326 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
327 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
328 return false;
329
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000330 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000331 if (!I) {
332 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
333 // can be executed unconditionally.
334 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
335 if (C->canTrap())
336 return false;
337 return true;
338 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000340
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000341 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000342 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000343 if (PBB == BB)
344 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000345
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
347 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000348 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
349 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000350 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000351 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000352
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000353 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
354 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000355 if (!AggressiveInsts)
356 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000357
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000358 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
360 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000361
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000362 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
363 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
364 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000365 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000367
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000369
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000370 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
371 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
372 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
373 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
374 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
375 // enabled further IR optimizations.
376 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
377 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000378 return false;
379
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000380 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
381 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382
383 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
384 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000385 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000386 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
387 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000388 return false;
389 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
390 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000391 return true;
392}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000393
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000394/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000395/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000396static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000397 // Normal constant int.
398 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000399 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000400 return CI;
401
402 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
403 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000404 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000405
406 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
407 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
408 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
409
410 // IntToPtr const int.
411 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
412 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
413 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
414 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
415 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
416 return CI;
417 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000418 return cast<ConstantInt>(
419 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000420 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000421 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000422}
423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000425
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000426/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
427/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
428/// structure.
429/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
430/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
431/// representing the different cases for the switch.
432/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
433/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
434/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
435/// fail.
436struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000437 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000438
439 /// Value found for the switch comparison
440 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
441
442 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
443 Value *Extra = nullptr;
444
445 /// Set of integers to match in switch
446 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
447
448 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
449 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000450
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000452 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000453 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000454 }
455
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000458 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000459
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
462 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
463 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000464 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
465 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000466 CompValue = NewVal;
467 return (CompValue != nullptr);
468 }
469
470 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
471 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
472 /// match depending on isEQ).
473 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
474 /// against is placed in CompValue.
475 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
476 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000477 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000478 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
479 ICmpInst *ICI;
480 ConstantInt *C;
481 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000482 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000483 return false;
484 }
485
486 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000487 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488
489 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000490 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000491 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000492 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000493 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
494 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
495
496 /*
497 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
498 x : BITVECTOR(64);
499 y : BITVECTOR(64);
500 z : BITVECTOR(64);
501 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
502 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
503 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
504 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000505 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
506 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
507 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000508 */
509
510 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
511 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
512 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
513 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
514 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
515 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
516 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
517
518 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
519 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
520 //
521 // mask = (1 << z)
522 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
523 //
524 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
525 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
526
527 // Pattern match a special case:
528 /*
529 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
530 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
531 );
532 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000534 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
535 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000536 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000538 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 return false;
540
541 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000543 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
544 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000545 UsedICmps++;
546 return true;
547 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000548 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000550 // Pattern match a special case:
551 /*
552 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
553 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
554 );
555 */
556 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
557 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
558 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
559 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
560 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
561 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
562 return false;
563
564 Vals.push_back(C);
565 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
566 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
567 UsedICmps++;
568 return true;
569 }
570 }
571
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000573 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000574 return false;
575
576 UsedICmps++;
577 Vals.push_back(C);
578 return ICI->getOperand(0);
579 }
580
581 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000582 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
583 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584
585 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
586 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
587 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000588 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
589 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
591 }
592
593 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
594 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
595 // x != 0 && x != 1.
596 if (!isEQ)
597 Span = Span.inverse();
598
599 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000600 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000602 }
603
604 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000605 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000606 return false;
607
608 // Add all values from the range to the set
609 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
610 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000611
612 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000613 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000614 }
615
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000616 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
618 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
619 /// vector.
620 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000621 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000622 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
623 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000624
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000625 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
626 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000627 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000630 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000631 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000633 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000634 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000635
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000636 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
637 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
638 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000639 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
640 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
641 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
642 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000643 continue;
644 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000645
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000646 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000647 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000648 // Match succeed, continue the loop
649 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000650 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000651
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
653 // comparison against the same value as the others.
654 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
655 if (!Extra) {
656 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000657 continue;
658 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000659 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
660 CompValue = nullptr;
661 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000662 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000663 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000664};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000665
666} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000667
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000668static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000669 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000670 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
671 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
672 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
673 if (BI->isConditional())
674 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000675 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
676 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000677 }
678
679 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000680 if (Cond)
681 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000682}
683
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000684/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000685/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000686Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000687 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000688 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
689 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
690 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000691 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
692 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
693 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000694 CV = SI->getCondition();
695 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000696 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000698 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000699 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000701
702 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000703 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000704 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
705 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000706 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000707 CV = Ptr;
708 }
709 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000710 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000711}
712
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000713/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000714/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000715BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
716 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000717 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000718 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000719 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
720 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
721 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000722 return SI->getDefaultDest();
723 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000724
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000725 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000726 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000727 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000728 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
729 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000730 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000731}
732
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000733/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000734/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000735static void
736EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
737 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000738 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000739}
740
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000741/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
743 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000744 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
745
746 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
747 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
748 std::swap(V1, V2);
749
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000750 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000751 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000752 if (V1->size() == 1) {
753 // Just scan V2.
754 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
755 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
756 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
757 return true;
758 }
759
760 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
761 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
762 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
763 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
764 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
765 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
766 return true;
767 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
768 ++i1;
769 else
770 ++i2;
771 }
772 return false;
773}
774
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000775// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
776// least one non-zero weight.
777static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
778 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
779 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
780 MDNode *N = nullptr;
781 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
782 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
783 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
784}
785
786// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
787// exactly 2 weights.
788static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
789 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
790 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
791 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
792 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
793 MDNode *N = nullptr;
794 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
795 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
796 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
797 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
798}
799
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000800/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
801/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
802/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
803/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
804/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000805bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
806 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000807 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000808 if (!PredVal)
809 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000810
811 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
812 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000813 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
814 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000815
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000816 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
817 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
818
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000819 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000820 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 BasicBlock *PredDef =
822 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
823 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000824
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000825 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000828 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000829
830 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
831 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
832 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
833 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
834 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
835 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000836 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000837 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000838
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000839 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
840 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
841 // uncond br.
842 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
843 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000844 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000845 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000846
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000847 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000848 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000849
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000850 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000851 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
852 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000853
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000854 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
855 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000856 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000857
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000858 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
859 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000860 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000861 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
862 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000864 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000865 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000866
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000867 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
868 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000869 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000870 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
871 if (HasWeight)
872 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
873 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000874 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000875 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
876 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000877 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
878 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000879 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000880 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000882 Weights.pop_back();
883 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000884 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000885 SI->removeCase(i);
886 }
887 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000888 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000889 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000890
891 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000892 return true;
893 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000894
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
896 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000897 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000899 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
900 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000901 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000903 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
904 }
905 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000906
907 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
908 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000909 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000910 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
911 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
912 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
913 break;
914 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000915
916 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000917 if (!TheRealDest)
918 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000919
920 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
921 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000922 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
923 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
924 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000925 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000926 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000927
928 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000929 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000930 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000931
932 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000933 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
934 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000935
936 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
937 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000938}
939
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000940namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000941
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000942/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
943/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
944/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
945struct ConstantIntOrdering {
946 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
947 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
948 }
949};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000950
951} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000952
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000953static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
954 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
955 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
956 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000957 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000958 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000959 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000960}
961
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000962static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000963 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000964 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000965 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
967
968 return false;
969}
970
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000971/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
972/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
973/// metadata.
974static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
975 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000976 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 assert(MD);
978 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000979 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000980 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 }
982
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000983 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
984 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
985 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000986 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000987 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
988 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
989 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
990 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000991 }
992}
993
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000994/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000995static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000996 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
997 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
998 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
999 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1000 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001001 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001002}
1003
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001004/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1005/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001006/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1007/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001008bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1009 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001011 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1013 bool Changed = false;
1014
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001015 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001017 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001018
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1020 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001021 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001022
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001023 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001024 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1026 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001027 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001028 return false;
1029 }
1030 }
1031
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1035
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001036 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001037 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1038
1039 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1040 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1041 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001042 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001043
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001044 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1045 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001046 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1047 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1048
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001049 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001050 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001051 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001052 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1053 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1054 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001055 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1056 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1057 // successor's weights
1058 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001059
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001060 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001061 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001062 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001063 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001064 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1065 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1066 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001067 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001068
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001069 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1070 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1071 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001072 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1075 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1076 else {
1077 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1078 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001079
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001080 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1081 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001082 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1083 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001084 Weights.pop_back();
1085 }
1086
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001087 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001088 --i;
1089 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001090 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001091
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001092 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001093 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1094 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1095 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1096 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1097 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001098
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001099 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1100 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001101 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1102 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1103 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1104 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1105 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001106 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1107 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1108 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1109 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001110 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1111 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001112 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001113 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001114
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001115 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1116 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1117 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1118 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1119 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1120 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1121 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1122 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001123 } else {
1124 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1125 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1126 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001127 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1128 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001129 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1130 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1131 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001132
1133 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001134 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1135 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001136 Weights.pop_back();
1137 }
1138
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001139 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1140 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001141 --i;
1142 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001143 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001144
1145 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1146 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001147 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1148 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1149 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001150 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1151 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001152 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1153 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001154 PTIHandled.erase(
1155 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001156 }
1157
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001158 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1159 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001160 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001161 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001162 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1163 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001164 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001165 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001166 }
1167
1168 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1169 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1170 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001171 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1172 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001173
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001174 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001175 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001176 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001177 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001178 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001179 }
1180
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001181 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001182 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1183 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001184 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001185 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1186 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001187
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001188 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1189 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1190 FitWeights(Weights);
1191
1192 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1193
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001194 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001195 }
1196
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001197 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001198
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001199 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1200 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1201 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001202 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001203 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1204 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001205 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001206 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001207 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001208 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1209 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001210 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001211 }
1212 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1213 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001214
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001215 Changed = true;
1216 }
1217 }
1218 return Changed;
1219}
1220
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001221// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1222// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1223// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001224static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1225 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001226 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001227 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1228 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1229 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001230 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001231 return false;
1232 }
1233 }
1234 }
1235 return true;
1236}
1237
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001238static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001240/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1241/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1242/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001243static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001244 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001245 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1246 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1247 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1248 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1249 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001250 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1251 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001252
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001253 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1254 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1255
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001256 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001257 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1258 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1259 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1260 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1261 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001262 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001263 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001264 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001265 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001266 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001267 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001268 return false;
1269
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001270 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001271
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001272 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001273 do {
1274 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1275 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1276 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1277 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001278
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001279 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1280 return Changed;
1281
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1283 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1284 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001285 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001286 if (!I2->use_empty())
1287 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001288 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001289 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1290 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1291 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1292 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1293 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1294 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1295 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1296 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1297 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1298 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001299 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001300
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001301 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1302 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001303 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001304
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001305 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001306 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001307
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001308 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1309 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001310 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1311 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1312 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1313 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1314 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001315 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001316 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001317 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001318 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001319 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001320
1321 return true;
1322
1323HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001324 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1325 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001326 return Changed;
1327
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001328 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001329 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1330 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1331 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001332 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1333 continue;
1334
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001335 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1336 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001337 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1338 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001339 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001340
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001341 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001342 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001343 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001344 return Changed;
1345 }
1346 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001347
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001348 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001349 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001350 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001351 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001352 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1353 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001354 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001355 }
1356
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001357 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001358 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1359 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1360 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1361 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001362 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001363 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001364 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1365 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1366 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001367 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1368 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001369
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001370 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1371 // that determines the right value.
1372 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001373 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001374 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1375 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1376 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001377
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001378 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001379 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1380 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1381 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001382 }
1383 }
1384
1385 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001386 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1387 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001388
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001389 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001390 return true;
1391}
1392
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001393// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1394// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1395// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1396// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1397// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1398static bool canSinkInstructions(
1399 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1400 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001401 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1402 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1403 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1404 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1405 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1406 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1407 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1408 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001409
1410 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1411 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1412 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1413 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1414 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1415 return false;
1416
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001417 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1418 // have no uses.
1419 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1420 return false;
1421 }
1422
1423 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1424 for (auto *I : Insts)
1425 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1426 return false;
1427
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001428 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1429 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1430 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1431 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001432 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1433 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001434 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001435 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001436 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001437 return (PNUse &&
1438 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1439 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1440 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001441 }))
1442 return false;
1443 }
1444
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001445 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1446 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1447 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1448 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1449 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1450 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1451 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1452 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1453 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1454 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1455 }))
1456 return false;
1457 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1458 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1459 }))
1460 return false;
1461
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1463 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1464 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1465 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001466
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001467 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001468 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1469 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001470 };
1471 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1472 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1473 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1474 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001475 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1476 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001477 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1478 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001479 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001480 for (auto *I : Insts)
1481 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001482 }
1483 }
1484 return true;
1485}
1486
1487// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1488// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1489// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001490static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1492
1493 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1494 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1495 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001496 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1497 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1498 do {
1499 I = I->getPrevNode();
1500 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1501 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1502 Insts.push_back(I);
1503 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001505 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1506 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1507 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1508 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001509 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001510 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1511 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1512 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1513 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1514 return U == PNUse;
1515 }))
1516 return false;
1517 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001518
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001519 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1520 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001521 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1522 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1523 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1524 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1525 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1526 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1527 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1528 // small mess we may make.
1529 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1530 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1531 });
1532 if (!NeedPHI) {
1533 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1534 continue;
1535 }
1536
1537 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1538 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1539 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1540 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1541 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1542 for (auto *I : Insts)
1543 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1544 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1545 }
1546
1547 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1548 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1549 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1550 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1551 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1552
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001553 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001554 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001555 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001556 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1557 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1558 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1559 // loop below.
1560 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1561 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1562 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1563 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001564 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001565 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1566 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001567
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001568 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1569 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1570 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1571 // instruction and nuke it.
1572 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1573 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1574 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1575 PN->eraseFromParent();
1576 }
1577
1578 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1579 for (auto *I : Insts)
1580 if (I != I0)
1581 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001582
1583 return true;
1584}
1585
1586namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001587
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001588 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1589 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1590 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1591 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1592 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1593 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1594 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1595 // ...
1596 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1597 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1598 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1599 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001600
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001601 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001602 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001603 reset();
1604 }
1605
1606 void reset() {
1607 Fail = false;
1608 Insts.clear();
1609 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001610 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1611 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1612 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1613 if (!Inst) {
1614 // Block wasn't big enough.
1615 Fail = true;
1616 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001617 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001618 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001619 }
1620 }
1621
1622 bool isValid() const {
1623 return !Fail;
1624 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001625
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001626 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001627 if (Fail)
1628 return;
1629 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001630 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1631 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001632 // Already at beginning of block.
1633 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001634 Fail = true;
1635 return;
1636 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001637 }
1638 }
1639
1640 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1641 return Insts;
1642 }
1643 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001644
1645} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001646
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001647/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1648/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1649/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1650/// than one).
1651static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001652 // We support two situations:
1653 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1654 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1655 //
1656 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1657 // else-if patterns;
1658 //
1659 // if (a) f(1);
1660 // else if (b) f(2);
1661 //
1662 // produces:
1663 //
1664 // [if]
1665 // / \
1666 // [f(1)] [if]
1667 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001668 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001669 // | [f(2)]|
1670 // \ | /
1671 // [ end ]
1672 //
1673 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1674 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1675 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1676 //
1677 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1678 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1679 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1680 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1681 //
1682 // [if]
1683 // / \
1684 // [x(1)] [if]
1685 // | | \
1686 // | | \
1687 // | [x(2)] |
1688 // \ / |
1689 // [sink.split] |
1690 // \ /
1691 // [ end ]
1692 //
1693 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1694 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001695 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001696 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1697 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1698 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1699 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1700 Cond = T;
1701 else
1702 return false;
1703 }
1704 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001705 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001706
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001707 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001708 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1709 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1710 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1711 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1712 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1713 // PHIOperands.
1714 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1715 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1716 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001717 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001718 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1719 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1720 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1721 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1722 ++ScanIdx;
1723 --LRI;
1724 }
1725
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001726 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001727 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1728 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1729 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1730 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1731 ++NumPHIdValues;
1732 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1733 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1734 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1735 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001736
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001737 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1738 };
1739
1740 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001741 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1742 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1743 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1744 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1745 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1746 LRI.reset();
1747 unsigned Idx = 0;
1748 bool Profitable = false;
1749 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1750 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1751 Profitable = true;
1752 break;
1753 }
1754 --LRI;
1755 ++Idx;
1756 }
1757 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001758 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001759
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001760 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1761 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1762 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001763 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001764 // Edges couldn't be split.
1765 return false;
1766 Changed = true;
1767 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001768
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001769 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1770 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1771 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1772 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1773 // per sunk instruction).
1774 //
1775 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1776 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1777 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1778 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1779 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1780 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1781 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1782 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001783 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001784 << "\n");
1785
1786 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1787 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001788 LRI.reset();
1789 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001790 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001791 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001792 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001793 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001794
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001795 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001796 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001797 NumSinkCommons++;
1798 Changed = true;
1799 }
1800 return Changed;
1801}
1802
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001803/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1804/// conditional block.
1805///
1806/// We are looking for code like the following:
1807/// BrBB:
1808/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1809/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1810/// ... // function).
1811/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1812/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1813/// ThenBB:
1814/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1815/// br label EndBB
1816/// EndBB:
1817/// ...
1818/// We are going to transform this into:
1819/// BrBB:
1820/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1821/// ... //
1822/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1823/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1824/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1825/// ...
1826///
1827/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1828/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001829static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1830 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001831 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1832 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001833 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001834
1835 // Volatile or atomic.
1836 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001837 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001838
1839 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1840
1841 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001842 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001843 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1844 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1845 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001846 // Skip debug info.
1847 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1848 continue;
1849 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001850
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001851 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001852 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001853 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001854
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001855 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1856 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1857 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1858 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1859 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001860 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001861 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001862 }
1863
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001864 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001865}
1866
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001867/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001868///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001869/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1870/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1871/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1872/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1873/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1874///
1875/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1876/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1877/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1878/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1879///
1880///
1881/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1882/// \code
1883/// BB:
1884/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1885/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1886/// ThenBB:
1887/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001888/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001889/// EndBB:
1890/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1891/// ...
1892/// \endcode
1893///
1894/// Into this IR:
1895/// \code
1896/// BB:
1897/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1898/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1899/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1900/// ...
1901/// \endcode
1902///
1903/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001904static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001905 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001906 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1907 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1908 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1909 return false;
1910
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001911 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1912 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1913
1914 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1915 // to swap the select operands later.
1916 bool Invert = false;
1917 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1918 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1919 Invert = true;
1920 }
1921 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1922
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001923 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1924 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1925 // - They are defined in BB, and
1926 // - They have no side effects, and
1927 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1928 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1929
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001930 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1931
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001932 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001933 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1934 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001935 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001936 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001937 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001938 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001939 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001940 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1941 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001942 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001943 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001944
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001945 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001946 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001947 ++SpeculationCost;
1948 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001949 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001950
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001951 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001952 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1953 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1954 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001955 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001956 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001957 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1958 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001959 return false;
1960
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001961 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1962 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1963 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1964
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001965 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001966 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001967 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001968 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001969 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001970 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001971 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1972
1973 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001974 }
1975 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001976
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001977 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1978 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1979 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001980 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1981 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1982 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001983 I != E; ++I)
1984 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001985 ++SpeculationCost;
1986 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001987 return false;
1988 }
1989
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001990 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1991 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001992 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
1993 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1994 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001995
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001996 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001997 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001998 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001999 continue;
2000
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002001 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002002 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2003 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002004 return false;
2005
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002006 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002007 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2008 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2009 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002010 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2011
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002012 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2013 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002014 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002015 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2016 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002017 unsigned MaxCost =
2018 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002019 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002020 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002021
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002022 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2023 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2024 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002025 // constant expression.
2026 ++SpeculationCost;
2027 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002028 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002029 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002030
2031 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2032 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002033 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002034 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002035
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002036 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002037 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002038
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002039 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2040 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002041 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002042 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2043 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2044 if (Invert)
2045 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002046 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002047 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002048 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002049 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2050 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002051 }
2052
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002053 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2054 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002055 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002056 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2057
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002058 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002059 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2060 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002061
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002062 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002063 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002064 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2065 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2066 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2067 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2068 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002069
2070 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2071 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2072 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002073
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002074 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002075 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2076 // destinations were inverted.
2077 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002078 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002079 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002080 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002081 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002082 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2083 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002084 }
2085
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002086 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2087 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2088 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2089 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2090 I->eraseFromParent();
2091
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002092 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002093 return true;
2094}
2095
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002096/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002097static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2098 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002099 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002100
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002101 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002102 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2103 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002104 if (Size > 10)
2105 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002106 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002107
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002108 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002109 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002110 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2111 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002112 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2113 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002114 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002115
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002116 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2117 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002118
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002119 return true;
2120}
2121
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002122/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2123/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2124/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002125static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2126 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002127 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2128 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002129 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2130 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002131 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2132 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002134 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2135 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002136 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002137 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002138 }
2139
2140 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2142 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002144 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002145 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002146 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2147 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2148 }))
2149 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002150
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002151 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2152 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002153 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002154 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002155 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2156 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002157
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002158 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2159 // branch to RealDest.
2160 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2161 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002163 if (RealDest == BB)
2164 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002165 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002166 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2167 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002168
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002169 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2170 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2171 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2172 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002173 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2174 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2175 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002176 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002177
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002178 // Update PHI nodes.
2179 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002180
2181 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2182 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2183 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2184 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002185 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2187 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2188 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2189 continue;
2190 }
2191 // Clone the instruction.
2192 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002193 if (BBI->hasName())
2194 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002196 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002197 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2198 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002199 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2200 *i = PI->second;
2201 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002202
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002204 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002205 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2206 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2207 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002208 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002209 N = nullptr;
2210 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002211 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002212 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002213 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002214 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002215 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2216 if (N)
2217 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002218
2219 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2220 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2221 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2222 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002223 }
2224
2225 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2226 // to EdgeBB instead.
2227 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2228 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2229 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2230 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2231 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2232 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002233
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002234 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002235 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002236 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002237
2238 return false;
2239}
2240
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002241/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2242/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002243static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2244 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002245 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2246 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2247 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2248 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2249 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2250 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002251 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2252 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2253 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002254 if (!IfCond ||
2255 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2256 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2257 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002258
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002259 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2260 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2261 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2262 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2263 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2264 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2265 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2266 if (NumPhis > 2)
2267 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002268
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002269 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2270 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2271 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002272 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002273 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2274 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002275 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2276 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002277
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002278 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2279 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002280 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002281 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002282 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002283 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002284 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002285
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002286 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002287 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002288 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002289 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002290 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002291 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002292
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002293 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002294 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2295 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002296 if (!PN)
2297 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002298
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002299 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2300 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2301 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2302 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2303 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2304 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2305 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002306
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002307 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2308 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2309 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2310 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002311 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002312 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2313 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2314 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002315 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002316 } else {
2317 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002318 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2319 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002320 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002321 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002322 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2323 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002324 return false;
2325 }
2326 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002328 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002329 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002330 } else {
2331 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002332 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2333 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002334 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002335 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002336 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2337 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002338 return false;
2339 }
2340 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002341
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002342 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002343 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002344
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002345 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2346 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002347 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002348 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002349
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002350 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2351 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002352 if (IfBlock1) {
2353 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2354 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002355 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002356 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002357 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002358 }
2359 if (IfBlock2) {
2360 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2361 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002362 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002363 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002364 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002365 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002366
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002367 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2368 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002369 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002370 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002371
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002372 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2373 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2374 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002375 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002376 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002377
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002378 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2379 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2380 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2381 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002382 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2383 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002384 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002385 return true;
2386}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002387
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002388/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2389/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002390/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002391static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002392 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002393 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2394 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2395 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2396 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2397 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002398
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002399 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2400 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2401 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002402 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002403 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002404 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002405 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002406
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002407 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002408 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2409 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2410 // branch into a return.
2411 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2412 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2413 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002414 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002415 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002416 return true;
2417 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002418
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002419 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2420 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2421 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2422 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002423
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002424 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2425 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2426 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2427 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2428 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2429 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2430 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002431
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002432 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2433 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2434 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2435 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2436 // safe.
2437 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2438 if (TCV->canTrap())
2439 return false;
2440 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2441 if (FCV->canTrap())
2442 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002443
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002444 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2445 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2446 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2447 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002448
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002449 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2450 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002451 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002452 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002453 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2454 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2455 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2456 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002457 TrueValue =
2458 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002459 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002460 }
2461
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002462 Value *RI =
2463 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002464
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002465 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002466
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002467 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002468 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002469 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002470
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002471 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2472
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002473 return true;
2474}
2475
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002476/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002477/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002478static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002479 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2480 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002481 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2482 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002483 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2484 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2485 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2486 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2487 return true;
2488 }
2489 }
2490 return false;
2491}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002492
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002493/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2494/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2495/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2496static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2497 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2498 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2499 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2500 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2501 bool PredHasWeights =
2502 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2503 bool SuccHasWeights =
2504 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2505 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2506 if (!PredHasWeights)
2507 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2508 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2509 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2510 return true;
2511 } else {
2512 return false;
2513 }
2514}
2515
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002516/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2517/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2518/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002519bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002520 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002521
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002522 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002523 if (BI->isConditional())
2524 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2525 else {
2526 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2527 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002528 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002529 // predecessor.
2530 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2531 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2532 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2533 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2534 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002535 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002536 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002537 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2538 Cond = Curr;
2539 break;
2540 }
2541 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2542 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2543 return false;
2544 }
2545 }
2546
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002547 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002548 return false;
2549 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002550
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002551 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2552 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002553 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002554
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002555 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002556 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002557
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002558 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002559 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2560 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002561
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002562 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002563 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002564
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002565 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2566 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2567 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2568 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2569 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2570 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002571 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002572 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2573 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2574 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002575 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002576 return false;
2577 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2578 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2579 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2580 return false;
2581 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2582 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2583 // and Cond.
2584 ++NumBonusInsts;
2585 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2586 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2587 return false;
2588 }
2589
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002590 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2591 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2592 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2593 if (CE->canTrap())
2594 return false;
2595 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2596 if (CE->canTrap())
2597 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002598
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002599 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002600 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002601 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002602 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2603 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002604
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002605 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2606 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002607 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002608
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002609 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2610 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2611 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002612 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002613 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002614 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002615 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2616 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002617 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002618
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002619 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002620 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002621 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002622
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002623 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002624 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002625 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002626 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002627 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002628 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2629 Opc = Instruction::And;
2630 InvertPredCond = true;
2631 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2632 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2633 InvertPredCond = true;
2634 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002635 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002636 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002637 } else {
2638 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2639 continue;
2640 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002641
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002642 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002643 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002644
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002645 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2646 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002647 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002648
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002649 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2650 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2651 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2652 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002653 NewCond =
2654 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002655 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002656
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002657 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002658 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002659 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002660
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002661 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002662 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002663 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2664 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2665 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002666 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002667 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002668 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002669 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2670 continue;
2671 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2672 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002673 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002674 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002675
2676 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2677 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2678 // only given the branch precondition.
2679 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2680 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002681 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002682
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002683 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2684 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002685 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002686 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002687
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002688 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2689 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002690 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002692 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002693 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002694 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002695 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002696
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002697 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002698 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2699 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002700 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2701
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002702 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002703 bool HasWeights =
2704 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2705 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002706 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2707
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002708 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002709 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002710 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2711 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002712 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002713 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002714 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002715 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2716 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2717 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002718 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2719 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2720 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002721 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002722 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2723 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2724 }
2725 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002726 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002727 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2728 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002729 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002730 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002731 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2732 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2733 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2734 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002735 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2736 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002737 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2738 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2739 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002740 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2741 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2742 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2743
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002744 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2745 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002746 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002747 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002748 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002749 } else {
2750 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2751 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002752 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002753 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002754 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002755 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002756 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2757 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2758 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2759 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002760 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2761 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2762 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2763 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002764 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002765 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2766 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002767 } else {
2768 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2769 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2770 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002771 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2772 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002773 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002774 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2775 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2776 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2777 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 }
2779 }
2780 // Update PHI Node.
2781 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2782 MergedCond);
2783 }
2784 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2785 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2786 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2787 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002788 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002789
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002790 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2791 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2792 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2793 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2794
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002795 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2796 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2797
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002798 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002799 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2800 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2801 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002802
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002803 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002804 }
2805 return false;
2806}
2807
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002808// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2809// nullptr.
2810static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2811 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2812 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2813 if (!BB)
2814 continue;
2815 for (auto &I : *BB)
2816 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2817 if (S)
2818 // Multiple stores seen.
2819 return nullptr;
2820 else
2821 S = SI;
2822 }
2823 }
2824 return S;
2825}
2826
2827static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2828 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2829 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2830 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2831 //
2832 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2833 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2834 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2835 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2836 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2837 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2838 // one.
2839 //
2840 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2841 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2842 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2843 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2844 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002845
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002846 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2847 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2848 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2849 if (!AlternativeV)
2850 break;
2851
2852 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2853 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2854 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2855 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2856 break;
2857 PHI = nullptr;
2858 }
2859 if (PHI)
2860 return PHI;
2861
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002862 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2863 if (!AlternativeV &&
2864 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2865 return V;
2866
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002867 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002868 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2869 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2870 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002871 PHI->addIncoming(
2872 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002873 return PHI;
2874}
2875
2876static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2877 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2878 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002879 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2880 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002881 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2882 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2883 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2884 };
2885
2886 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2887 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2888 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2889 if (!BB)
2890 return true;
2891 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2892 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2893 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002894 unsigned N = 0;
2895 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2896 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2897 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2898 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2899 ++N;
2900 // Free instructions.
2901 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2902 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2903 continue;
2904 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002905 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002906 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002907 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2908 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2909 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002910 };
2911
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002912 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2913 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2914 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002915 return false;
2916
2917 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2918 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2919 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2920 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2921 // testing.
2922 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2923 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2924 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2925 return false;
2926
2927 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2928 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2929 return false;
2930
2931 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2932 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2933 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2934 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2935 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2936 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2937 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2938 //
2939 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2940 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2941 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2942 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2943 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2944 return false;
2945 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2946 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2947 return false;
2948 if (QTB)
2949 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2950 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2951 return false;
2952 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2953 I != E; ++I)
2954 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2955 return false;
2956
2957 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2958 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2959 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2960 ->getCondition();
2961 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2962 ->getCondition();
2963
2964 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2965 PStore->getParent());
2966 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2967 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2968
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002969 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2970
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002971 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2972 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2973
2974 if (InvertPCond)
2975 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2976 if (InvertQCond)
2977 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2978 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2979
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002980 auto *T =
2981 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002982 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2983 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2984 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2985 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2986 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2987 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002988 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
2989 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
2990 unsigned TypeAlignment =
2991 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
2992 unsigned MinAlignment;
2993 unsigned MaxAlignment;
2994 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
2995 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
2996 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
2997 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
2998 // store that doesn't execute.
2999 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3000 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3001 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3002 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3003 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3004 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3005 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3006 } else {
3007 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3008 // the stored value.
3009 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3010 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003011
3012 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3013 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003014
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003015 return true;
3016}
3017
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003018static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3019 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003020 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3021 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3022 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3023 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3024 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3025 // PBI and QBI.
3026 //
3027 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3028 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3029 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3030 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3031 //
3032 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3033 //
3034 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3035 // / \ | \
3036 // PTB PFB | PFB
3037 // \ / | /
3038 // QBI QBI
3039 // / \ | \
3040 // QTB QFB | QFB
3041 // \ / | /
3042 // PostBB PostBB
3043 //
3044 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3045 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3046 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003047 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3048 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3049 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3050 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3051 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3052
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003053 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3054 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3055 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3056 PostBB = QFB;
3057
3058 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3059 if (!PostBB)
3060 return false;
3061
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003062 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3063 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3064 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3065 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3066 InvertPCond = true;
3067 }
3068 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3069 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3070 InvertQCond = true;
3071 }
3072
3073 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3074 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3075 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3076 PTB = nullptr;
3077 if (QTB == PostBB)
3078 QTB = nullptr;
3079
3080 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3081 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3082 // predecessor.
3083 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003084 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003085 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003086 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003087 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3088 return false;
3089 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3090 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3091 return false;
Craig Topperc2280682017-04-17 22:13:00 +00003092 if (!PostBB->hasNUses(2) || !QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003093 return false;
3094
3095 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3096 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003097 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003098 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3099 if (!BB)
3100 continue;
3101 for (auto &I : *BB)
3102 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3103 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3104 }
3105 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3106 if (!BB)
3107 continue;
3108 for (auto &I : *BB)
3109 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3110 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3111 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003112
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003113 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3114 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3115 // clear what it contains.
3116 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3117
3118 bool Changed = false;
3119 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3120 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003121 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003122 return Changed;
3123}
3124
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003125/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3126/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003127/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3128/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003129static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3130 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003131 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3132 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003133
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003134 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003135 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003136 // this conditional branch redundant.
3137 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3138 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3139 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3140 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3141 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3142 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3143 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003144 BI->setCondition(
3145 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3146 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003147 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003148
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003149 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3150 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3151 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3152 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003153 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003154 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3155 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3156 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003157 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3158 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3159 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003160 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003161 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003162 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3163 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003164 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3165 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003166 NewPN->addIncoming(
3167 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3168 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003169 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003170 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003171 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003172 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003173
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003174 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003175 return true;
3176 }
3177 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003178
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003179 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3180 if (CE->canTrap())
3181 return false;
3182
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003183 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3184 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3185 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003186 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003187 return true;
3188
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003189 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003190 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003191 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003192 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3193 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3194 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3195 ++BBI;
3196 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003197 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003198
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003199 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003200 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3201 PBIOp = 0;
3202 BIOp = 0;
3203 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3204 PBIOp = 0;
3205 BIOp = 1;
3206 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3207 PBIOp = 1;
3208 BIOp = 0;
3209 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3210 PBIOp = 1;
3211 BIOp = 1;
3212 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003213 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003214 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003215
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003216 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3217 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3218 // keep getting unwound.
3219 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3220 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003221
3222 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003223 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3224 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003225
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003226 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3227 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3228 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3229
3230 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003231 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003232 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3233 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003234 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3235 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003236
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3238 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3239 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3240 if (CE->canTrap())
3241 return false;
3242
3243 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3244 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3245 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3246 if (CE->canTrap())
3247 return false;
3248 }
3249
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003251 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003253 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003254 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003255
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003256 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3257 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3258 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3259 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3260 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3261 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3262 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3263 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3264 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3265 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003266 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3267 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003268 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3269 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003270 }
3271
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003272 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003273
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003274 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3275 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003276
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003277 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3278 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003279 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003280 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003281 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003282
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003283 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3284 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003285 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003286
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003287 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003288 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003290 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3291 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3292 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3293 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003294
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003295 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3296 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003297 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003298 bool HasWeights =
3299 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3300 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003301 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003302 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3303 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3304 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3305 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003306 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3307 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3308 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003309 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3310 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3311 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003312 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003313 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3314
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003315 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003316 }
3317
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003318 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3319 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003320 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003321
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003322 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3323 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3324 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3325 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003326 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3327 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3328 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3329 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003330 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3331 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003332 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3333 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003334 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003335 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3336 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3337 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3338 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003339 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003340 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3341 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3342 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3343 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3344 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3345 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3346 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3347 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3348
3349 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3350
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003351 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003352 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003353 }
3354 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003355
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003356 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3357 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003358
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003359 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3360 // one fewer predecessor.
3361 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003362}
3363
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003364// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3365// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003366// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3367// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3368// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3369static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003370 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3371 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003372 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003373 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3374 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3375 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3376 // successor.
3377 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003378 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003379
3380 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003381 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003382 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3383 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003384 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003385 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003386 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003387 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003388 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3389 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003390 }
3391
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003392 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3393 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3394
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003395 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003396 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003397 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3398 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3399 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003400 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003401 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003402 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3403 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003404 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3405 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003406 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003407 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003408 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3409 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3410 // terminator must be unreachable.
3411 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3412 } else {
3413 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3414 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3415 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003416 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003417 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003418 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003419 else
3420 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003421 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422 }
3423
3424 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3425 return true;
3426}
3427
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003428// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003429// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3430// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3431// unconditional otherwise.
3432static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3433 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3434 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3435 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3436 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3437 return false;
3438
3439 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3440 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003441 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3442 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003443
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003444 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3445 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3446 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3447 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3448 if (HasWeights) {
3449 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3450 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003451 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003452 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003453 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003454 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003455 }
3456 }
3457
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003458 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003459 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3460 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003461}
3462
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003463// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003464// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3465// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3466// with
3467// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3468static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3469 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3470 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3471 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3472 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3473 return false;
3474
3475 // Extract the actual blocks.
3476 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3477 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3478
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003479 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003480 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3481 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003482}
3483
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003484/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3485/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003486/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3487/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3488/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3489/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3490/// like:
3491///
3492/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3493/// DEFAULT:
3494/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3495/// br label %end
3496/// end:
3497/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003498///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003499/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3500/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003501static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003502 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003503 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003504 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003505
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003506 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3507 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003508 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3509 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003510
3511 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3512 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003513
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003514 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3515 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3516 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3517 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003518 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3519 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003520
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003521 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3522 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3523 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003524
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003525 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3526 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3527 // away.
3528 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3529 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3530 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3531 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003532
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003533 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003534 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003535 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3536 }
3537 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003538 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003539 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003540
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003541 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3542 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3543 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003544 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003545 Value *V;
3546 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3547 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3548 else
3549 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003550
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003551 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3552 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3553 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003554 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003555 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003556
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003557 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3558 // the block.
3559 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003560 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003561 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003562 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3563 return false;
3564
3565 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3566 // true in the PHI.
3567 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003568 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003569
3570 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3571 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3572
3573 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3574 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3575 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3576 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3577
3578 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3579 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003580 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3581 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003582 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3583 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3584 if (HasWeights) {
3585 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3586 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3587 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003588 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003589 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3590
3591 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003592 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003593 }
3594 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003595 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003596
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003597 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003598 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3599 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3600 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003601 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3602 return true;
3603}
3604
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003605/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003606/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3607/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003608static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3609 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003610 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003611 if (!Cond)
3612 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003613
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003614 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3615 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3616 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003617
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003618 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003619 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3620 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003621 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003622 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3623 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3624 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003625
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003626 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003627 if (!CompVal)
3628 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003629
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003630 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3631 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3632 return false;
3633
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003634 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3635
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003636 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3637 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3638 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3639 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003640
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003641 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003642 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003643 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3644 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003645
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003646 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3647 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3648
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003649 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3650 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003651 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3652 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3653 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003654
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003655 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003656
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003657 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003658 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3659 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003660
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003661 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3662 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3663 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3664 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003665 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3666 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003667 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3668 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003669 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3670
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003671 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003672 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003673 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003674 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003675
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003676 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003677
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003678 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3679 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003680 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003681
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003682 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003683 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003684 BB = NewBB;
3685 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003686
3687 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003688 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3689 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003690 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3691 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003693
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003694 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003695 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003696
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003697 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3698 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3699 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003700
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003701 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3702 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3703 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003704 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003705 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3706 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003707 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003708 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3709 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003710
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003711 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3712 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003713
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003714 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003715 return true;
3716}
3717
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003718bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003719 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3720 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3721 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3722 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3723 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3724 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003725
3726 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003727}
3728
3729// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3730bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3731 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3732
3733 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3734 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3735 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003736 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003737 while (++I != E)
3738 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3739 return false;
3740
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003741 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003742 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3743
3744 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003745 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3746 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003747 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3748 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3749
3750 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3751 // it has other dependents.
3752 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3753 continue;
3754
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003755 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003756 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3757 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3758 continue;
3759
3760 bool isTrivial = true;
3761
3762 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3763 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3764 while (++I != E)
3765 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3766 isTrivial = false;
3767 break;
3768 }
3769
3770 if (isTrivial)
3771 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3772 }
3773
3774 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003775 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3776 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003777
3778 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3779 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3780 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3781 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3782 // to remove them all.
3783 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3784 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3785
3786 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3787 PI != PE;) {
3788 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3789 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3790 }
3791
3792 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3793 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3794 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3795 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3796 // predecessors.
3797 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3798 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3799 }
3800
3801 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3802 if (pred_empty(BB))
3803 BB->eraseFromParent();
3804
3805 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3806}
3807
3808// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3809bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003810 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3811 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003812 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3813 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003814
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003815 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3816 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003817 while (++I != E)
3818 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3819 return false;
3820
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003821 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003822 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3823 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3824 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003825 }
3826
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003827 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3828 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003829 if (LoopHeaders)
3830 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003831 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003832}
3833
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003834static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003835 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3836 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3837 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3838 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3839 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3840 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3841 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3842 // simplified.
3843 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003844 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3845 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003846 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3847 return false;
3848
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003849 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3850 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3851 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3852 return false;
3853
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003854 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003855 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003856 while (++I != E) {
3857 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3858 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003859 return false;
3860
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003861 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3862 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3863 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3864 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3865 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3866 break;
3867 default:
3868 return false;
3869 }
3870 }
3871
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003872 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3873 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003874 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003875 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003876
3877 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3878 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3879 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3880 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3881 // are both EH pads).
3882 if (UnwindDest) {
3883 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3884 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003885 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003886 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003887 I != IE; ++I) {
3888 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003889
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003890 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003891 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003892 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003893 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3894 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3895 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3896 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3897 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3898 // pad being removed.
3899 //
3900 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3901 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3902 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3903 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3904 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3905 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3906
3907 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3908 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3909
3910 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3911 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3912 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3913 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003914 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003915 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003916 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3917 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3918 }
3919 } else {
3920 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3921 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3922 // predecessors with this value.
3923 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3924 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3925 }
3926 }
3927 }
3928
3929 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003930 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003931 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3932 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003933 I != IE;) {
3934 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3935 // being moved to another block.
3936 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3937 if (PN->use_empty())
3938 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3939 // when we erase BB below.
3940 continue;
3941
3942 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3943 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3944 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3945 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3946 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3947 if (pred != BB)
3948 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3949 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3950 }
3951 }
3952
3953 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3954 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3955 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003956 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003957 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003958 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003959 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003960 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003961 }
3962 }
3963
3964 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3965 BB->eraseFromParent();
3966 return true;
3967}
3968
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003969// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3970static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3971 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3972 // with.
3973 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3974 if (!UnwindDest)
3975 return false;
3976
3977 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3978 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3979 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3980 return false;
3981
3982 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3983 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3984 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3985 return false;
3986
3987 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3988 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3989 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3990 // funclet bundle operands.
3991 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3992 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3993 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3994 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3995 // destination.
3996 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3997 RI->eraseFromParent();
3998
3999 return true;
4000}
4001
4002bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004003 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4004 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4005 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4006 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4007 return false;
4008
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004009 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004010 return true;
4011
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004012 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004013 return true;
4014
4015 return false;
4016}
4017
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004018bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004019 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004020 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4021 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004022
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004023 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004024 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4025 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004026 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4027 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004028 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4029 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4030 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4031 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4032 else
4033 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4034 }
4035 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004036
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004037 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004038 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004039 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4040 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4041 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004042 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004043 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004044 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004045
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004046 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004047 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004048 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4049 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004050 if (LoopHeaders)
4051 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004053
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004054 return true;
4055 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004056
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004057 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4058 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4059 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4060 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4061 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004062
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004063 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4064 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4065 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004066 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004067 return true;
4068 }
4069 return false;
4070}
4071
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004072bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4073 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004076
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004077 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4078 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004079 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4080 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004082 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4083 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4084 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004085 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4086 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004087
4088 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004089 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004090 if (SI->isVolatile())
4091 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004092 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004093 if (LI->isVolatile())
4094 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004095 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004096 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4097 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004098 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004099 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4100 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004101 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4102 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4103 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4104 // default.
4105 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4106 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4107 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4108 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004109 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4110 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004111 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004112 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004113 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4114 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4115 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4116 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004117 }
4118
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004119 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4120 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4121 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004122 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123 Changed = true;
4124 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004125
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004126 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4127 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004128 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4129 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004131 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004132 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4133 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004134 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004135 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004136 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4137 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4138 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4139 TI->eraseFromParent();
4140 Changed = true;
4141 }
4142 } else {
4143 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004144 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004145 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4146 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004147 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004148 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4149 Changed = true;
4150 }
4151 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004152 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004153 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004154 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004155 ++i;
4156 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004157 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004158 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4159 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4160 e = SI->case_end();
4161 Changed = true;
4162 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004163 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4164 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4165 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4166 Changed = true;
4167 }
4168 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4169 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4170 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4171 Changed = true;
4172 continue;
4173 }
4174
4175 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4176 E = CSI->handler_end();
4177 I != E; ++I) {
4178 if (*I == BB) {
4179 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4180 --I;
4181 --E;
4182 Changed = true;
4183 }
4184 }
4185 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4186 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4187 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4188 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4189 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4190 } else {
4191 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4192 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4193 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4194 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4195 }
4196 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4197 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4198 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4199 Changed = true;
4200 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004201 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004202 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4203 TI->eraseFromParent();
4204 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004205 }
4206 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004207
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004208 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004209 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004210 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4211 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004212 if (LoopHeaders)
4213 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004214 return true;
4215 }
4216
4217 return Changed;
4218}
4219
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004220static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4221 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4222
4223 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4224 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4225 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4226 return false;
4227 }
4228 return true;
4229}
4230
4231/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4232/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004233static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004234 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004235
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004236 bool HasDefault =
4237 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004238
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004239 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4240 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4241 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004242 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4243 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004244
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004245 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4246 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004247 if (!DestA)
4248 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004249 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004250 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004251 continue;
4252 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004253 if (!DestB)
4254 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004255 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004256 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004257 continue;
4258 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004259 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004260 }
4261
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004262 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4263 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004264 assert(DestA != DestB);
4265 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4266 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4267 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4268
4269 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4270 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4271 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4272 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4273 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4274 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4275 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4276 OtherDest = DestB;
4277 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4278 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4279 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4280 OtherDest = DestA;
4281 } else
4282 return false;
4283
4284 // Start building the compare and branch.
4285
4286 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004287 Constant *NumCases =
4288 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004289
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004290 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4291 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004292 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4293
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004294 Value *Cmp;
4295 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004296 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004297 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4298 else
4299 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004300 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004301
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004302 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004303 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4304 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004305 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4306 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004307 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4308 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4309 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4310 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4311 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4312 else
4313 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4314 }
4315 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4316 TrueWeight /= 2;
4317 FalseWeight /= 2;
4318 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004319 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004320 }
4321 }
4322
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004323 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4324 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4325 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004326 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4327 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004328 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004329 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4330 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004331 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4332 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004333 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4334 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004335 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4336 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4337 }
4338
4339 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004340 SI->eraseFromParent();
4341
4342 return true;
4343}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004344
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004345/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004346/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004347static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004348 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004349 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004350 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004351 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004352
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004353 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4354 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4355 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004356 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004357 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4358
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004359 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004360 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004361 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004362 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004363 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004364 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004365 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004366 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004367 }
4368 }
4369
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004370 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4371 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004372 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4373 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004374 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004375 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4376 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004377 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004378 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004379 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004380 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004381 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004382 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004383 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4384 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004385 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4386 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004387 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4388 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4389 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4390 return true;
4391 }
4392
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004393 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4394 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4395 if (HasWeight) {
4396 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4397 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4398 }
4399
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004400 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004401 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004402 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4403 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004404 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004405 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004406 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004407 Weights.pop_back();
4408 }
4409
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004410 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004411 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4412 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004413 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004414 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004415 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004416 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004417 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004418
4419 return !DeadCases.empty();
4420}
4421
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004422/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4423/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004424/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4425/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4426/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4427static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004428 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004429 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004430 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004431 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004432 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004433
4434 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4435 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004436 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004437
4438 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4439
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004440 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4441 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004442 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4443
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004444 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004445 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4446 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004447
4448 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004449 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004450 }
4451
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004452 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004453}
4454
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004455/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4456/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004457/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004458static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004459 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4460
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004461 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004462 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4463 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004464 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004465 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4466 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004467
4468 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4469 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4470 // switchbb:
4471 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4472 // i32 17, label %succ
4473 // ...
4474 // succ:
4475 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4476 // -->
4477 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4478
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004479 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004480 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4481 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4482 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4483 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4484 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004485 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4486 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4487 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4488 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004489 Changed = true;
4490 }
4491 }
4492
4493 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004494 int PhiIdx;
4495 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4496 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004497 }
4498
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004499 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4500 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4501 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004502 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4503 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004504
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004505 for (int Index : Indexes)
4506 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004507 Changed = true;
4508 }
4509
4510 return Changed;
4511}
4512
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004513/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004514/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004515static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004516 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4517 return false;
4518 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4519 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004520
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004521 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4522 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4523 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4524 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004525
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004526 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004527 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4528 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004529 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4530 return false;
4531 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004532
4533 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4534 return false;
4535
4536 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004537}
4538
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004539/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004540/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004541static Constant *
4542LookupConstant(Value *V,
4543 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004544 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4545 return C;
4546 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4547}
4548
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004549/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004550/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4551/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004552/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004553static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004554ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4555 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004556 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004557 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4558 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004559 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004560 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4561 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4562 if (A->isNullValue())
4563 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004564 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004565 }
4566
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004567 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4568 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4569 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4570 COps.push_back(A);
4571 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004572 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004573 }
4574
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004575 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004576 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4577 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004578 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004579
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004580 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004581}
4582
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004583/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004584/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004585/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004586/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004587static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004588GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004589 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004590 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004591 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004592 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4593 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4594
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004595 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4596 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004597 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004598 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4599 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4600 ++I) {
4601 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4602 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004603 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004604 return false;
4605 Pred = CaseDest;
4606 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4607 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4608 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4609 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004610 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004611 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004612
4613 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4614 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4615 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4616 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4617 User *User = Use.getUser();
4618 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4619 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4620 continue;
4621 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4622 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4623 continue;
4624 return false;
4625 }
4626
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004627 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004628 } else {
4629 break;
4630 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004631 }
4632
4633 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4634 if (!*CommonDest)
4635 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4636 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4637 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4638 return false;
4639
4640 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004641 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4642 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004643 if (Idx == -1)
4644 continue;
4645
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004646 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004647 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004648 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004649 return false;
4650
4651 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004652 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004653 return false;
4654
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004655 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004656 }
4657
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004658 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004659}
4660
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004661// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4662// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004663static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004664 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4665 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004666 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4667 if (I.first == Result) {
4668 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4669 return;
4670 }
4671 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004672 UniqueResults.push_back(
4673 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004674}
4675
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004676// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004677// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4678// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4679// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004680static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4681 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4682 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4683 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004684 const DataLayout &DL,
4685 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004686 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4687 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4688
4689 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4690 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4691 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004692 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004693 return false;
4694
4695 // Only one value per case is permitted
4696 if (Results.size() > 1)
4697 return false;
4698 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4699
4700 // Check the PHI consistency.
4701 if (!PHI)
4702 PHI = Results[0].first;
4703 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4704 return false;
4705 }
4706 // Find the default result value.
4707 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4708 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4709 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004710 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004711 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4712 // is unreachable.
4713 DefaultResult =
4714 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4715 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004716 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004717 return false;
4718
4719 return true;
4720}
4721
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004722// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4723// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004724// Example:
4725// switch (a) {
4726// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4727// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4728// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4729// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4730// default:
4731// return 4;
4732// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004733static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4734 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4735 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004736 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004737 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004738 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4739 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4740 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4741 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4742 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4743 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4744
4745 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4746 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4747 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4748 Value *const ValueCompare =
4749 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4750 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4751 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4752 }
4753 Value *const ValueCompare =
4754 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004755 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4756 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004757 }
4758
4759 return nullptr;
4760}
4761
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004762// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4763// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004764static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4765 Value *SelectValue,
4766 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4767 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4768 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4769 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4770 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4771
4772 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4773
4774 // Remove the switch.
4775 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4776 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4777
4778 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4779 continue;
4780 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4781 }
4782 SI->eraseFromParent();
4783}
4784
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004785/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004786/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4787/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004788static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4789 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004790 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004791 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4792 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4793 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4794 Constant *DefaultResult;
4795 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4796 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004797 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004798 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004799 return false;
4800 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4801 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4802 return false;
4803 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4804
4805 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004806 Value *SelectValue =
4807 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004808 if (SelectValue) {
4809 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4810 return true;
4811 }
4812 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4813 return false;
4814}
4815
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004816namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004817
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004818/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4819class SwitchLookupTable {
4820public:
4821 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4822 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4823 SwitchLookupTable(
4824 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4825 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004826 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004827
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004828 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4829 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4830 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004831
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004832 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4833 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4834 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4835 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004836
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004837private:
4838 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4839 // different ways.
4840 enum {
4841 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4842 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4843 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004844
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004845 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4846 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4847 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4848 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004849
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004850 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4851 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4852 // shift and mask operations.
4853 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004854
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004855 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4856 // instructions from the table.
4857 ArrayKind
4858 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004859
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004860 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004861 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004862
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004863 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004864 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4865 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004866
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004868 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4869 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004870
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004871 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004872 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004874
4875} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004876
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004877SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4878 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4879 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004880 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004881 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4882 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004883
4884 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004885 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004886
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004887 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4888
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004889 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004890 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004891 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4892 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4893 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004894 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004896 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004897 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4898
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004899 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004900 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004901 }
4902
4903 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004904 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004905 assert(DefaultValue &&
4906 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004907 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4909 if (!TableContents[I])
4910 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004911 }
4912
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004913 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004914 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004915 }
4916
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004917 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4918 // that single value.
4919 if (SingleValue) {
4920 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4921 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004922 }
4923
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004924 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4925 // table index.
4926 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4927 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4928 APInt PrevVal;
4929 APInt DistToPrev;
4930 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4931 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4932 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4933 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4934 if (!ConstVal) {
4935 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4936 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4937 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4938 break;
4939 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004940 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004941 if (I != 0) {
4942 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4943 if (I == 1) {
4944 DistToPrev = Dist;
4945 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4946 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4947 break;
4948 }
4949 }
4950 PrevVal = Val;
4951 }
4952 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4953 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4954 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4955 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4956 ++NumLinearMaps;
4957 return;
4958 }
4959 }
4960
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004961 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004962 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004963 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004964 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4965 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4966 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004967 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4968 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4969 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4970 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4971 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004972 }
4973 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4974 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4975 Kind = BitMapKind;
4976 ++NumBitMaps;
4977 return;
4978 }
4979
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004980 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004981 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004982 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4983
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004984 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4985 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004986 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004987 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004988 Kind = ArrayKind;
4989}
4990
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004991Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004992 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004993 case SingleValueKind:
4994 return SingleValue;
4995 case LinearMapKind: {
4996 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4997 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4998 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4999 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5000 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5001 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5002 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5003 return Result;
5004 }
5005 case BitMapKind: {
5006 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5007 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005008
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005009 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5010 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5011 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5012 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005013
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005014 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5015 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5016 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5017 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005018
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005019 // Shift down.
5020 Value *DownShifted =
5021 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5022 // Mask off.
5023 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5024 }
5025 case ArrayKind: {
5026 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5027 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5028 uint64_t TableSize =
5029 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5030 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5031 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5032 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5033 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005034
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005035 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5036 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5037 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5038 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5039 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005040 }
5041 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5042}
5043
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005044bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005045 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005046 Type *ElementType) {
5047 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005048 if (!IT)
5049 return false;
5050 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5051 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005052
5053 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005054 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005055 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005056 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005057}
5058
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005059/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5060/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005061static bool
5062ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5063 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5064 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005065 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5066 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005067
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005068 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005069 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005070 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5071 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005072
5073 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005074 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005075
5076 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005077 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5078 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5079 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005080
5081 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5082 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5083 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5084 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005085 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005086 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005087
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005088 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5089 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5090 return true;
5091
5092 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5093 if (HasIllegalType)
5094 return false;
5095
5096 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5097 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5098 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5099 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005100}
5101
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005102/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5103/// \code
5104/// if (idx < tablesize)
5105/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5106/// else
5107/// r = default_value;
5108/// if (r != default_value)
5109/// ...
5110/// \endcode
5111/// Is optimized to:
5112/// \code
5113/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5114/// if (cond)
5115/// r = table[idx];
5116/// else
5117/// r = default_value;
5118/// if (cond)
5119/// ...
5120/// \endcode
5121/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005122static void reuseTableCompare(
5123 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5124 Constant *DefaultValue,
5125 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005126 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5127 if (!CmpInst)
5128 return;
5129
5130 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5131 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5132 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5133 return;
5134
5135 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5136 if (!CmpOp1)
5137 return;
5138
5139 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5140 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5141 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5142
5143 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5144 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5145 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5146 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5147 return;
5148
5149 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5150 // compare result.
5151 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5152 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005153 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005154 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005155 return;
5156 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5157 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5158 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005159
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005160 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5161 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5162 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5163 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5164 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5165 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5166 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5167 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5168 return;
5169 }
5170
5171 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5172 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5173 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5174 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5175 } else {
5176 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005177 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5178 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5179 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005180 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5181 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5182 }
5183}
5184
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005185/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5186/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5187/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005188static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5189 const DataLayout &DL,
5190 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005191 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005192
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005193 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5194 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5195 // attribute is not set.
5196 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5197 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005198 return false;
5199
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005200 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5201 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5202
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005203 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5204 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5205 // string and lookup indices into that.
5206
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005207 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005208 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005209 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005210 return false;
5211
5212 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005213 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005214 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5215 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005216 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5217 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005218
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005219 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005220
5221 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005222 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005223
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005224 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5225 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5226 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005227
5228 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005229 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005230 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5231 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5232 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5233 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5234
5235 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005236 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005237 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005238 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005239 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005240 return false;
5241
5242 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005243 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5244 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5245 Constant *Value = I.second;
5246 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5247 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5248 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005249 }
5250 }
5251
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005252 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005253 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005254 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5255 }
5256
5257 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5258 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5259 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5260 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5261
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005262 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5263 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005264 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005265 bool HasDefaultResults =
5266 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5267 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005268
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005269 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5270 if (NeedMask) {
5271 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005272 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005273 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005274 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005275 return false;
5276 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005277
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005278 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5279 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5280 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005281 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005282 }
5283
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005284 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005285 return false;
5286
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005287 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005288 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005289 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5290 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005291
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005292 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005293 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005294 Value *TableIndex;
5295 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5296 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5297 else
5298 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5299 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005300
5301 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5302 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005303 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005304 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005305 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5306 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5307 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5308
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005309 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5310 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5311 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5312 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5313 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5314 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005315 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5316
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005317 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005318 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005319 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5320 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005321 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005322 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5323 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5324 RangeCheckBranch =
5325 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005326 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005327
5328 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5329 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005330
5331 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005332 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5333 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005334 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5335 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005336 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5337 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005338
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005339 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005340 // unnecessary illegal types.
5341 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5342 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5343 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005344 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005345 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5346 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005347 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5348 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005349 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5350 }
5351 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5352
5353 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5354 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5355 // else continue with table lookup.
5356 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005357 Value *MaskIndex =
5358 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5359 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5360 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5361 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005362 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5363
5364 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5365 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5366 }
5367
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005368 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005369 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005370 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5371 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5372 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5373 }
5374
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005375 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005376 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5377 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005378 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005379
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005380 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5381 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005382 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005383 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5384 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005385
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005386 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005387
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005388 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5389 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005390 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5391 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005392 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5393 ReturnedEarly = true;
5394 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005395 }
5396
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005397 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5398 // possible.
5399 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5400 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5401 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5402 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5403 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5404 }
5405 }
5406
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005407 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005408 }
5409
5410 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5411 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5412
5413 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005414 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005415 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005416
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005417 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005418 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005419 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5420 }
5421 SI->eraseFromParent();
5422
5423 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005424 if (NeedMask)
5425 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005426 return true;
5427}
5428
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005429static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5430 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5431 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5432 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5433 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5434 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5435 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005436
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005437 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5438}
5439
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005440/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5441/// of cases.
5442///
5443/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5444/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5445///
5446/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5447/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005448static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5449 const DataLayout &DL,
5450 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5451 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5452 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5453 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5454 return false;
5455 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5456 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5457 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5458 return false;
5459
5460 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5461 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5462 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5463 // as signed.
5464 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5465 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5466 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5467 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5468
5469 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5470 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5471 return false;
5472
5473 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5474 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5475 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005476 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005477
5478 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5479 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5480 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5481 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5482 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005483 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005484
5485 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5486 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5487 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5488 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5489 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5490 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5491 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5492 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005493 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005494 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5495 return false;
5496
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005497 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005498 for (auto &V : Values)
5499 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5500
5501 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5502 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5503 return false;
5504
5505 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5506 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5507 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5508 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5509 //
5510 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5511 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5512 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5513 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005514
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005515 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5516 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5517 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5518 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005519 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5520 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5521 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005522 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5523
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005524 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5525 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005526 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005527 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005528 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005529 }
5530 return true;
5531}
5532
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005533bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005534 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5535
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005536 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5537 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5538 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5539 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5540 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005541 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005542
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005543 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5544 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5545 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005546 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005547
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005548 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5549 // away into any preds.
5550 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5551 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5552 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5553 ++BBI;
5554 if (SI == &*BBI)
5555 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005556 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005557 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005558
5559 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005560 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005561 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005562
5563 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005564 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
5565 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005566
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005567 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5568 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005569
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005570 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005571 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005572
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005573 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5574 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5575 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5576 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5577 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005578 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5579 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005580 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005581
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005582 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005583 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005584
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005585 return false;
5586}
5587
5588bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5589 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5590 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005591
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005592 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5593 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5594 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5595 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005596 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005597 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5598 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005599 --i;
5600 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005601 Changed = true;
5602 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005603 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005604
5605 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5606 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5607 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5608 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5609 return true;
5610 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005611
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005612 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5613 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5614 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5615 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5616 return true;
5617 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005618
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005619 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5620 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005621 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005622 }
5623 return Changed;
5624}
5625
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005626/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5627/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5628/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5629/// a shared handler.
5630///
5631/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5632/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5633/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5634/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5635/// sinking in this file)
5636///
5637/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5638/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5639/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5640/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5641/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5642/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5643///
5644/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5645/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5646/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5647static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5648 BasicBlock *BB) {
5649 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5650 assert(Succ);
5651 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5652 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5653 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5654 return false;
5655
5656 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5657 if (BB == OtherPred)
5658 continue;
5659 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5660 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5661 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5662 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005663 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5664 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005665 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5666 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5667 continue;
5668
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005669 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005670 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5671 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5672 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5673 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5674 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005675 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5676 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005677 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5678 }
5679
5680 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5681 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005682 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5683 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5684 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005685 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5686 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5687 }
5688
5689 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5690 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5691 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5692 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5693 }
5694
5695 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5696 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5697 BI->eraseFromParent();
5698 return true;
5699 }
5700 return false;
5701}
5702
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005703bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5704 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005705 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005706 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005707
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005708 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005709 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5710 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005711 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5712 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
5713 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005714 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005715 (LoopHeaders && (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005716 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005717 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005718 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005719 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005720
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005721 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5722 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005723 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5724 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5725 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5726 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005727 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005728 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005729 return true;
5730 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005731
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005732 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5733 // equivalent.
5734 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005735 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5736 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005737 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005738 return true;
5739 }
5740
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005741 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5742 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5743 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5744 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005745 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005746 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005747 return false;
5748}
5749
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005750static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5751 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5752 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5753 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5754 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5755 return nullptr;
5756 PredPred = PPred;
5757 }
5758 return PredPred;
5759}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005760
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005761bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005762 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005763
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 // Conditional branch
5765 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5766 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5767 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5768 // switch.
5769 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005770 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005771 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005772
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005773 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5774 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5775 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5776 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5777 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5778 ++I;
5779 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005780 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005781 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005782 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005783 ++I;
5784 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5785 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5786 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005787 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005788 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005789 }
5790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005791
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005792 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005793 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005794 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005795
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005796 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5797 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5798 // of the BI branch.
5799 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5800 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5801 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005802 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5803 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005804 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005805 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005806 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005807 if (Implication) {
5808 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5809 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5810 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5811 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5812 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5813 BI->setCondition(CI);
5814 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005815 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005816 }
5817 }
5818 }
5819
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005820 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5821 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5822 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005823 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005824 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005825
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005826 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5827 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5828 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5829 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005830 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5831 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005832 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005833 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005834 } else {
5835 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005836 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005837 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5838 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5839 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005840 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005841 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005842 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005843 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005844 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005845 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005846 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5847 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5848 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005849 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005850 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005851 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005852
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005853 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5854 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5855 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5856 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005857 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
5858 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005859
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005860 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005861 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5862 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005863 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005864 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005865 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005866
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005867 // Look for diamond patterns.
5868 if (MergeCondStores)
5869 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5870 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5871 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005872 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005873 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005874
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005875 return false;
5876}
5877
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005878/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5879static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5880 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5881 if (!C)
5882 return false;
5883
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005884 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005885 return false;
5886
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005887 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005888 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005889 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005890
5891 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5892 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005893 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5894 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5895 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5896 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005897 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005898 return false;
5899
5900 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5901 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5902 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5903 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5904
5905 // Look through bitcasts.
5906 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5907 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5908
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005909 // Load from null is undefined.
5910 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005911 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5912 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005913
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005914 // Store to null is undefined.
5915 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005916 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005917 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5918 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005919
5920 // A call to null is undefined.
5921 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5922 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005923 }
5924 return false;
5925}
5926
5927/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005928/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005929static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005930 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5931 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5932 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
5933 TerminatorInst *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005934 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5935 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005936 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005937 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5938 // destination from conditional branches.
5939 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5940 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5941 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005942 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5943 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005944 BI->eraseFromParent();
5945 return true;
5946 }
5947 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5948 }
5949
5950 return false;
5951}
5952
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005953bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005954 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005955
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005956 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005957 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005958
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005959 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5960 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005961 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005962 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005963 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5964 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5965 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005966 }
5967
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005968 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5969 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005970 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005971
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005972 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5973 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5974
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005975 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5976 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5977
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005978 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5979 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5980 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005981 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5982 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005983
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00005984 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
5985 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
5986
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005987 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5988
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005989 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5990 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00005991 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005992 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005993 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005994
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005995 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00005996 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005997 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005998 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5999 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006000 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006001 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6002 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006003 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006004 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006005 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6006 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006007 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006008 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6009 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006010 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006011 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6012 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006013 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006014 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6015 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006016 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006017 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6018 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006019 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006020 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6021 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006022 }
6023
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006024 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006025}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006026
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006027bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6028 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006029 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006030 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006031 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006032 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006033}